xref: /linux/include/net/mac80211.h (revision 165f2d2858013253042809df082b8df7e34e86d7)
1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3  * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4  *
5  * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6  * Copyright 2006-2007	Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7  * Copyright 2007-2010	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8  * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9  * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10  * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2019 Intel Corporation
11  */
12 
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15 
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
22 #include <net/codel.h>
23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
24 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
25 
26 /**
27  * DOC: Introduction
28  *
29  * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30  * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31  * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32  * drivers.
33  */
34 
35 /**
36  * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37  *
38  * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
39  * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40  * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41  * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
42  * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43  * tasklet function.
44  *
45  * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
46  *	 use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
47  */
48 
49 /**
50  * DOC: Warning
51  *
52  * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53  * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54  */
55 
56 /**
57  * DOC: Frame format
58  *
59  * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60  * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61  * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62  * hardware.
63  *
64  * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65  *
66  * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67  * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68  *
69  * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70  * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
71  */
72 
73 /**
74  * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75  *
76  * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77  * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78  * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79  * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80  *
81  * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82  * suspend.
83  *
84  * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85  *
86  */
87 
88 /**
89  * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90  *
91  * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92  * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93  * between different stations/interfaces.
94  * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95  * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96  * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97  *
98  * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99  * driver operation.
100  *
101  * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
102  * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
103  * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104  *
105  * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106  * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107  *
108  * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
109  * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
110  * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111  *
112  * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
113  * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
114  * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
115  * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
116  * ieee80211_return_txq().
117  *
118  * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
119  * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
120  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
121  * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
122  * .release_buffered_frames().
123  * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
124  * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
125  * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
126  */
127 
128 struct device;
129 
130 /**
131  * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
132  *
133  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
134  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
135  */
136 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
137 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =		16,
138 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =	BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
139 };
140 
141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE	0xff
142 
143 /**
144  * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
145  * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
146  * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
147  * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
148  * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
149  */
150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
151 	IEEE80211_AC_VO		= 0,
152 	IEEE80211_AC_VI		= 1,
153 	IEEE80211_AC_BE		= 2,
154 	IEEE80211_AC_BK		= 3,
155 };
156 
157 /**
158  * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
159  *
160  * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
161  * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
162  *
163  * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
164  * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
165  *	2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
166  * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
167  * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
168  * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
169  * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
170  * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
171  * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
172  */
173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
174 	u16 txop;
175 	u16 cw_min;
176 	u16 cw_max;
177 	u8 aifs;
178 	bool acm;
179 	bool uapsd;
180 	bool mu_edca;
181 	struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
182 };
183 
184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
185 	unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
186 	unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
187 	unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
188 	unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
189 };
190 
191 /**
192  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
193  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
194  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
195  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
196  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
197  *	this is used only with channel switching with CSA
198  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
199  */
200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
201 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH		= BIT(0),
202 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS	= BIT(1),
203 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR		= BIT(2),
204 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL	= BIT(3),
205 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH	= BIT(4),
206 };
207 
208 /**
209  * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
210  *
211  * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
212  * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
213  *
214  * @def: the channel definition
215  * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
216  * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
217  *	active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
218  * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
219  *	after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
220  *	this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
221  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
222  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
223  *	sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
224  */
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
226 	struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
227 	struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
228 
229 	u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
230 
231 	bool radar_enabled;
232 
233 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
234 };
235 
236 /**
237  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
238  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
239  *	exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
240  *	needs to be switched from one to the other.
241  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
242  *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
243  *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
244  *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
245  *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
246  *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
247  *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
248  *      for changes/removal.)
249  */
250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
251 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
252 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
253 };
254 
255 /**
256  * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
257  *
258  * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
259  * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
260  * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
261  * done.
262  *
263  * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
264  * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
265  * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
266  */
267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
268 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
269 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
270 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
271 };
272 
273 /**
274  * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
275  *
276  * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
277  * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
278  *
279  * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
280  *	also implies a change in the AID.
281  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
282  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
283  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
284  * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
285  * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
286  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
287  * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
288  *	reason (IBSS and managed mode)
289  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
290  *	new beacon (beaconing modes)
291  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
292  *	enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
293  * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
294  * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
295  * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
296  * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
297  *	that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
298  * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
299  * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
300  * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
301  * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
302  * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
303  * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
304  *	changed
305  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
306  *	currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
307  * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
308  *	note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
309  *	context had been assigned.
310  * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
311  * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
312  * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
313  *	keep alive) changed.
314  * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
315  * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
316  *	functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
317  * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
318  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
319  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
320  *
321  */
322 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
323 	BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC		= 1<<0,
324 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT	= 1<<1,
325 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE	= 1<<2,
326 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT		= 1<<3,
327 	BSS_CHANGED_HT			= 1<<4,
328 	BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES		= 1<<5,
329 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT		= 1<<6,
330 	BSS_CHANGED_BSSID		= 1<<7,
331 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON		= 1<<8,
332 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED	= 1<<9,
333 	BSS_CHANGED_CQM			= 1<<10,
334 	BSS_CHANGED_IBSS		= 1<<11,
335 	BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER		= 1<<12,
336 	BSS_CHANGED_QOS			= 1<<13,
337 	BSS_CHANGED_IDLE		= 1<<14,
338 	BSS_CHANGED_SSID		= 1<<15,
339 	BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP	= 1<<16,
340 	BSS_CHANGED_PS			= 1<<17,
341 	BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER		= 1<<18,
342 	BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS		= 1<<19,
343 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO		= 1<<20,
344 	BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH		= 1<<21,
345 	BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
346 	BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS		= 1<<23,
347 	BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE		= 1<<24,
348 	BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE		= 1<<25,
349 	BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER	= 1<<26,
350 	BSS_CHANGED_TWT			= 1<<27,
351 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD		= 1<<28,
352 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR	= 1<<29,
353 
354 	/* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
355 };
356 
357 /*
358  * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
359  * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
360  * filtering will be disabled.
361  */
362 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
363 
364 /**
365  * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
366  * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
367  * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
368  * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
369  * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
370  *	they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
371  *	once each time the timeout triggers.
372  */
373 enum ieee80211_event_type {
374 	RSSI_EVENT,
375 	MLME_EVENT,
376 	BAR_RX_EVENT,
377 	BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
378 };
379 
380 /**
381  * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
382  * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
383  * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
384  */
385 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
386 	RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
387 	RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
388 };
389 
390 /**
391  * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
392  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
393  */
394 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
395 	enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
396 };
397 
398 /**
399  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
400  * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
401  * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
402  * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
403  * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
404  */
405 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
406 	AUTH_EVENT,
407 	ASSOC_EVENT,
408 	DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
409 	DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
410 };
411 
412 /**
413  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
414  * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
415  * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
416  * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
417  */
418 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
419 	MLME_SUCCESS,
420 	MLME_DENIED,
421 	MLME_TIMEOUT,
422 };
423 
424 /**
425  * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
426  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
427  * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
428  * @reason: the reason code if applicable
429  */
430 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
431 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
432 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
433 	u16 reason;
434 };
435 
436 /**
437  * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
438  * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
439  * @tid: the tid
440  * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
441  */
442 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
443 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
444 	u16 tid;
445 	u16 ssn;
446 };
447 
448 /**
449  * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
450  * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
451  * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
452  * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
453  * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
454  * @u:union holding the fields above
455  */
456 struct ieee80211_event {
457 	enum ieee80211_event_type type;
458 	union {
459 		struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
460 		struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
461 		struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
462 	} u;
463 };
464 
465 /**
466  * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
467  *
468  * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
469  *
470  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
471  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
472  */
473 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
474 	u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
475 	u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
476 };
477 
478 /**
479  * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
480  *
481  * @lci: LCI subelement content
482  * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
483  * @lci_len: LCI data length
484  * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
485  */
486 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
487 	const u8 *lci;
488 	const u8 *civicloc;
489 	size_t lci_len;
490 	size_t civicloc_len;
491 };
492 
493 /**
494  * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
495  *
496  * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
497  * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
498  *
499  * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
500  * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
501  * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
502  * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
503  *	ACK, BACK or both
504  * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
505  * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
506  * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
507  * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
508  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
509  * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
510  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
511  * @assoc: association status
512  * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
513  *	or not
514  * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
515  * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
516  * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
517  * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
518  * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
519  * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
520  *	valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
521  *	with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
522  * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
523  *	as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
524  *	HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
525  *	only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
526  *	association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
527  *	%BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
528  * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
529  *	the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
530  *	(see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
531  * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
532  *	is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
533  *	IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
534  *	by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
535  *	guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
536  * @beacon_int: beacon interval
537  * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
538  * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
539  *	index into the rate table configured by the driver in
540  *	the current band.
541  * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
542  * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
543  * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
544  * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
545  * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
546  *	configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
547  * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
548  * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
549  *	This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
550  *	Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
551  *	be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
552  * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
553  *	implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
554  *	cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
555  *	relation to the newly configured threshold.
556  * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
557  *	implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
558  *	threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
559  * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
560  * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
561  * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
562  *	may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
563  *	The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
564  *	to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
565  * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
566  *	may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
567  *	array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
568  * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
569  * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
570  *	hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
571  *	your driver/device needs to do.
572  * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
573  *	offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
574  * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
575  * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
576  * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
577  * @txpower: TX power in dBm.  INT_MIN means not configured.
578  * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
579  *	Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
580  *	TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
581  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
582  *	userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
583  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
584  * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
585  * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
586  *	to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
587  *	if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
588  * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
589  *	transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
590  *	In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
591  *	a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
592  * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
593  *	protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
594  *	station.
595  * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
596  *	responder functionality.
597  * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
598  * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
599  * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
600  * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
601  * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
602  * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
603  *	nontransmitted BSSIDs
604  * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
605  *	in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
606  * @he_operation: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to
607  * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
608  * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
609  */
610 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
611 	const u8 *bssid;
612 	u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
613 	bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
614 	bool uora_exists;
615 	bool ack_enabled;
616 	u8 uora_ocw_range;
617 	u16 frame_time_rts_th;
618 	bool he_support;
619 	bool twt_requester;
620 	bool twt_responder;
621 	/* association related data */
622 	bool assoc, ibss_joined;
623 	bool ibss_creator;
624 	u16 aid;
625 	/* erp related data */
626 	bool use_cts_prot;
627 	bool use_short_preamble;
628 	bool use_short_slot;
629 	bool enable_beacon;
630 	u8 dtim_period;
631 	u16 beacon_int;
632 	u16 assoc_capability;
633 	u64 sync_tsf;
634 	u32 sync_device_ts;
635 	u8 sync_dtim_count;
636 	u32 basic_rates;
637 	struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
638 	int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
639 	u16 ht_operation_mode;
640 	s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
641 	u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
642 	s32 cqm_rssi_low;
643 	s32 cqm_rssi_high;
644 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
645 	struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
646 	__be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
647 	int arp_addr_cnt;
648 	bool qos;
649 	bool idle;
650 	bool ps;
651 	u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
652 	size_t ssid_len;
653 	bool hidden_ssid;
654 	int txpower;
655 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
656 	struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
657 	bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
658 	u16 max_idle_period;
659 	bool protected_keep_alive;
660 	bool ftm_responder;
661 	struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
662 	/* Multiple BSSID data */
663 	bool nontransmitted;
664 	u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
665 	u8 bssid_index;
666 	u8 bssid_indicator;
667 	bool ema_ap;
668 	u8 profile_periodicity;
669 	struct ieee80211_he_operation he_operation;
670 	struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
671 	struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
672 };
673 
674 /**
675  * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
676  *
677  * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
678  *
679  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
680  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
681  *	number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
682  *	number and increasing the sequence number only when the
683  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
684  *	assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
685  *	for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
686  *	that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
687  *	If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
688  *	assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
689  *	802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
690  *	beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
691  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
692  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
693  *	station
694  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
695  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
696  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
697  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
698  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
699  *	because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
700  *	avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
701  *	firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
702  *	went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
703  *	the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
704  *	that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
705  *	since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
706  *	hardware queue.
707  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
708  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
709  * 	is for the whole aggregation.
710  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
711  * 	so consider using block ack request (BAR).
712  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
713  *	set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
714  *	be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
715  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
716  *	that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
717  *	off-channel operation.
718  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
719  *	used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
720  *	it can be sent out.
721  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
722  *	used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
723  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
724  *	used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
725  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
726  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
727  *	be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
728  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
729  *	transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
730  *	by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
731  *	queue gets full.
732  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
733  *	after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
734  *	be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
735  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
736  *	code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
737  *	should kick the MLME state machine.
738  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
739  *	MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
740  *	status to user space)
741  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
742  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
743  *	frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
744  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
745  *	the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
746  *	in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
747  *	handled properly by the device.
748  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
749  *	testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
750  *	TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
751  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
752  *	This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
753  *	frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
754  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
755  *	when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
756  *	an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
757  *	the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
758  *	PS-Poll responses.
759  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
760  *	This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
761  *	the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
762  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
763  *	would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
764  *	monitor injection).
765  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
766  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
767  *	any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
768  *	This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
769  *	behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
770  *
771  * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
772  *	 forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
773  */
774 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
775 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS		= BIT(0),
776 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ		= BIT(1),
777 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK			= BIT(2),
778 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT		= BIT(3),
779 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT		= BIT(4),
780 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM	= BIT(5),
781 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU			= BIT(6),
782 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED		= BIT(7),
783 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED		= BIT(8),
784 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK			= BIT(9),
785 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU			= BIT(10),
786 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK		= BIT(11),
787 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE	= BIT(12),
788 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK	= BIT(13),
789 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING	= BIT(14),
790 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED		= BIT(15),
791 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT		= BIT(16),
792 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER		= BIT(17),
793 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES		= BIT(18),
794 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION	= BIT(19),
795 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX		= BIT(20),
796 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX	= BIT(21),
797 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC			= BIT(22),
798 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC			= BIT(23) | BIT(24),
799 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN		= BIT(25),
800 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE	= BIT(26),
801 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE		= BIT(27),
802 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP		= BIT(28),
803 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE		= BIT(29),
804 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG		= BIT(30),
805 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED	= BIT(31),
806 };
807 
808 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT		23
809 
810 /**
811  * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
812  *
813  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
814  *	protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
815  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
816  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
817  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
818  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
819  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
820  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
821  *
822  * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
823  */
824 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
825 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO	= BIT(0),
826 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE		= BIT(1),
827 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT		= BIT(2),
828 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU			= BIT(3),
829 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT		= BIT(4),
830 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP	= BIT(5),
831 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_HW_80211_ENCAP	= BIT(6),
832 };
833 
834 /*
835  * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
836  * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
837  */
838 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |		      \
839 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
840 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |	      \
841 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED |	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |		      \
842 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |	      \
843 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
844 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |		      \
845 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
846 
847 /**
848  * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
849  *	Rate Control algorithm.
850  *
851  * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
852  * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
853  *
854  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
855  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
856  *	This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
857  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
858  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
859  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
860  *	into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
861  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
862  *	Greenfield mode.
863  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
864  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
865  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
866  *	(80+80 isn't supported yet)
867  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
868  *	adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
869  *	NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
870  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
871  */
872 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
873 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS		= BIT(0),
874 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT		= BIT(1),
875 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE	= BIT(2),
876 
877 	/* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
878 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS			= BIT(3),
879 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD		= BIT(4),
880 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(5),
881 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA		= BIT(6),
882 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI		= BIT(7),
883 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS			= BIT(8),
884 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(9),
885 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(10),
886 };
887 
888 
889 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
890 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
891 
892 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
893 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
894 
895 /* maximum number of rate stages */
896 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES	4
897 
898 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
899 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE	4
900 
901 /**
902  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
903  *
904  * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
905  * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
906  * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
907  *
908  * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
909  * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
910  *
911  * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
912  * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
913  *
914  * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
915  * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
916  * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
917  * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
918  * information::
919  *
920  *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
921  *
922  * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
923  * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
924  * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
925  * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
926  * information should then contain::
927  *
928  *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
929  *
930  * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
931  * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
932  */
933 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
934 	s8 idx;
935 	u16 count:5,
936 	    flags:11;
937 } __packed;
938 
939 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY		31
940 
941 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
942 					  u8 mcs, u8 nss)
943 {
944 	WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
945 	WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
946 	rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
947 }
948 
949 static inline u8
950 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
951 {
952 	return rate->idx & 0xF;
953 }
954 
955 static inline u8
956 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
957 {
958 	return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
959 }
960 
961 /**
962  * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
963  *
964  * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
965  *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
966  *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
967  *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
968  *
969  * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
970  * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
971  * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
972  * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
973  * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
974  * @control: union part for control data
975  * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
976  * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
977  * @control.use_rts: use RTS
978  * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
979  * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
980  * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
981  * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
982  * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
983  * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
984  * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
985  * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
986  * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
987  * @pad: padding
988  * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
989  * @status: union part for status data
990  * @status.rates: attempted rates
991  * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
992  * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
993  * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
994  * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
995  * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission
996  * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
997  * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
998  * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
999  * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1000  * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1001  * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1002  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1003  * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1004  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1005  * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1006  */
1007 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1008 	/* common information */
1009 	u32 flags;
1010 	u32 band:3,
1011 	    ack_frame_id:13,
1012 	    hw_queue:4,
1013 	    tx_time_est:10;
1014 	/* 2 free bits */
1015 
1016 	union {
1017 		struct {
1018 			union {
1019 				/* rate control */
1020 				struct {
1021 					struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1022 						IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1023 					s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1024 					u8 use_rts:1;
1025 					u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1026 					u8 short_preamble:1;
1027 					u8 skip_table:1;
1028 					/* 2 bytes free */
1029 				};
1030 				/* only needed before rate control */
1031 				unsigned long jiffies;
1032 			};
1033 			/* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1034 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1035 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1036 			u32 flags;
1037 			codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1038 		} control;
1039 		struct {
1040 			u64 cookie;
1041 		} ack;
1042 		struct {
1043 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1044 			s32 ack_signal;
1045 			u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1046 			u8 ampdu_len;
1047 			u8 antenna;
1048 			u16 tx_time;
1049 			bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1050 			void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1051 		} status;
1052 		struct {
1053 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1054 				IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1055 			u8 pad[4];
1056 
1057 			void *rate_driver_data[
1058 				IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1059 		};
1060 		void *driver_data[
1061 			IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1062 	};
1063 };
1064 
1065 static inline u16
1066 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1067 {
1068 	/* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1069 	 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1070 	 */
1071 	info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1072 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1073 }
1074 
1075 static inline u16
1076 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1077 {
1078 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1079 }
1080 
1081 /**
1082  * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1083  *
1084  * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1085  * @info: Basic tx status information
1086  * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1087  * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1088  */
1089 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1090 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1091 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1092 	struct sk_buff *skb;
1093 	struct rate_info *rate;
1094 };
1095 
1096 /**
1097  * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1098  *
1099  * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1100  * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1101  * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1102  *
1103  * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1104  * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1105  * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1106  * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1107  */
1108 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1109 	const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1110 	size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1111 	const u8 *common_ies;
1112 	size_t common_ie_len;
1113 };
1114 
1115 
1116 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1117 {
1118 	return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1119 }
1120 
1121 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1122 {
1123 	return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1124 }
1125 
1126 /**
1127  * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1128  *
1129  * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1130  *
1131  * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1132  * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1133  * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1134  * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1135  *
1136  * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1137  *	 info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1138  *	 instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1139  */
1140 static inline void
1141 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1142 {
1143 	int i;
1144 
1145 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1146 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1147 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1148 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1149 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1150 	/* clear the rate counts */
1151 	for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1152 		info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1153 
1154 	BUILD_BUG_ON(
1155 	    offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1156 	memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1157 	       sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1158 	       offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1159 }
1160 
1161 
1162 /**
1163  * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1164  *
1165  * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1166  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1167  *	Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1168  * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1169  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1170  *	verification has been done by the hardware.
1171  * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1172  *	If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1173  *	hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1174  * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1175  *	flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1176  *	Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1177  *	is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1178  * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1179  *	de-duplication by itself.
1180  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1181  *	the frame.
1182  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1183  *	the frame.
1184  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1185  *	field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1186  *	was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1187  *	merging.
1188  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1189  *	field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1190  *	(including FCS) was received.
1191  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1192  *	field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1193  * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1194  *	Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1195  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1196  *	number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1197  *	each A-MPDU
1198  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1199  *	subframes of a single A-MPDU
1200  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1201  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1202  *	on this subframe
1203  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1204  *	is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1205  * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1206  *	done by the hardware
1207  * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1208  *	processing it in any regular way.
1209  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1210  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1211  * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1212  *	monitor interfaces.
1213  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1214  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1215  * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1216  *	subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1217  *	All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1218  *	if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1219  *	the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1220  *	deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1221  *	subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1222  *	either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1223  *	interleaved with other frames.
1224  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1225  *	radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1226  *	the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1227  * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1228  *	This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1229  *	the first subframe.
1230  * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1231  *	be done in the hardware.
1232  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1233  *	frame
1234  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1235  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1236  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1237  *
1238  *	 - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1239  *	 - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1240  *	 - DATA3_CODING
1241  *	 - DATA5_GI
1242  *	 - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1243  *	 - DATA6_NSTS
1244  *	 - DATA3_STBC
1245  *
1246  *	from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1247  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1248  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1249  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1250  * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1251  *	the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1252  *	in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1253  *	known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1254  */
1255 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1256 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR		= BIT(0),
1257 	RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED		= BIT(1),
1258 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START	= BIT(2),
1259 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(3),
1260 	RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED		= BIT(4),
1261 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC		= BIT(5),
1262 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC 	= BIT(6),
1263 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START		= BIT(7),
1264 	RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL		= BIT(8),
1265 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS		= BIT(9),
1266 	RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED		= BIT(10),
1267 	RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED		= BIT(11),
1268 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN	= BIT(12),
1269 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST		= BIT(13),
1270 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR	= BIT(14),
1271 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN	= BIT(15),
1272 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END		= BIT(16),
1273 	RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR		= BIT(17),
1274 	RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR		= BIT(18),
1275 	RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE		= BIT(19),
1276 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA	= BIT(20),
1277 	RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(21),
1278 	RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN		= BIT(22),
1279 	RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED		= BIT(23),
1280 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT		= BIT(24),
1281 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN	= BIT(25),
1282 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE		= BIT(26),
1283 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU		= BIT(27),
1284 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG		= BIT(28),
1285 	RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU			= BIT(29),
1286 };
1287 
1288 /**
1289  * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1290  *
1291  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1292  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1293  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1294  *	if the driver fills this value it should add
1295  *	%IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1296  *	to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1297  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1298  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1299  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1300  */
1301 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1302 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE		= BIT(0),
1303 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI		= BIT(2),
1304 	RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF		= BIT(3),
1305 	RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK		= BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1306 	RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC		= BIT(6),
1307 	RX_ENC_FLAG_BF			= BIT(7),
1308 };
1309 
1310 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT		4
1311 
1312 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1313 	RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1314 	RX_ENC_HT,
1315 	RX_ENC_VHT,
1316 	RX_ENC_HE,
1317 };
1318 
1319 /**
1320  * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1321  *
1322  * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1323  * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1324  * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1325  *
1326  * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1327  * 	(TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1328  * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1329  *	needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1330  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1331  *	it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1332  * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1333  * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1334  *	This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1335  *	for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1336  * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1337  *	unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1338  *	@IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1339  * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1340  *	values were filled.
1341  * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1342  *	support dB or unspecified units)
1343  * @antenna: antenna used
1344  * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1345  *	HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1346  * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1347  * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1348  * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1349  * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1350  * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1351  * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1352  * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1353  * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1354  * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1355  * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1356  *	each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1357  * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1358  * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1359  */
1360 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1361 	u64 mactime;
1362 	u64 boottime_ns;
1363 	u32 device_timestamp;
1364 	u32 ampdu_reference;
1365 	u32 flag;
1366 	u16 freq;
1367 	u8 enc_flags;
1368 	u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1369 	u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1370 	u8 rate_idx;
1371 	u8 nss;
1372 	u8 rx_flags;
1373 	u8 band;
1374 	u8 antenna;
1375 	s8 signal;
1376 	u8 chains;
1377 	s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1378 	u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1379 	u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1380 };
1381 
1382 /**
1383  * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1384  * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1385  *	(this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1386  *	 bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1387  * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1388  *	alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1389  *	description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1390  *	Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1391  * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1392  * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1393  * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1394  *	then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1395  *	@data field.
1396  * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1397  *	the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1398  *	length
1399  * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1400  *
1401  * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1402  * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1403  * data.
1404  */
1405 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1406 	u32 present;
1407 	u8 align;
1408 	u8 oui[3];
1409 	u8 subns;
1410 	u8 pad;
1411 	u16 len;
1412 	u8 data[];
1413 } __packed;
1414 
1415 /**
1416  * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1417  *
1418  * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1419  *
1420  * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1421  *	to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1422  *	or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1423  * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1424  *	This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1425  *	meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1426  *	transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1427  *	Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1428  *	driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1429  *	for more.
1430  * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1431  *	the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1432  *	may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1433  *	be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1434  *	it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1435  * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1436  *	operating channel.
1437  */
1438 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1439 	IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR		= (1<<0),
1440 	IEEE80211_CONF_PS		= (1<<1),
1441 	IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE		= (1<<2),
1442 	IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL	= (1<<3),
1443 };
1444 
1445 
1446 /**
1447  * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1448  *
1449  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1450  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1451  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1452  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1453  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1454  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1455  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1456  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1457  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1458  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1459  */
1460 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1461 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS		= BIT(1),
1462 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL	= BIT(2),
1463 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR		= BIT(3),
1464 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS		= BIT(4),
1465 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER		= BIT(5),
1466 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL		= BIT(6),
1467 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS	= BIT(7),
1468 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE		= BIT(8),
1469 };
1470 
1471 /**
1472  * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1473  *
1474  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1475  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1476  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1477  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1478  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1479  */
1480 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1481 	IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1482 	IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1483 	IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1484 	IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1485 
1486 	/* keep last */
1487 	IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1488 };
1489 
1490 /**
1491  * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1492  *
1493  * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1494  *
1495  * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1496  *
1497  * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1498  * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1499  *	in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1500  *	has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1501  * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1502  *	powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1503  *	the CONF_PS flag is set.
1504  *
1505  * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1506  *	value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1507  *
1508  * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1509  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1510  *
1511  * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1512  *	(a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1513  *	but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1514  * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1515  *	frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1516  *	number of transmissions not the number of retries
1517  *
1518  * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1519  *	%IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1520  *	configured for an HT channel.
1521  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1522  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1523  */
1524 struct ieee80211_conf {
1525 	u32 flags;
1526 	int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1527 
1528 	u16 listen_interval;
1529 	u8 ps_dtim_period;
1530 
1531 	u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1532 
1533 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1534 	bool radar_enabled;
1535 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1536 };
1537 
1538 /**
1539  * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1540  *
1541  * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1542  * operation.
1543  *
1544  * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1545  *	Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1546  *	announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1547  *	the driver passed into mac80211.
1548  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1549  *	rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1550  * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1551  *	scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1552  * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1553  * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1554  * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1555   *	current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1556   *	channel, expressed in TU.
1557  */
1558 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1559 	u64 timestamp;
1560 	u32 device_timestamp;
1561 	bool block_tx;
1562 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1563 	u8 count;
1564 	u32 delay;
1565 };
1566 
1567 /**
1568  * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1569  *
1570  * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1571  *	on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1572  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1573  *	monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1574  *	connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1575  *	provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1576  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1577  *	interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1578  *	but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1579  *	only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1580  * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1581  *	and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1582  *	this is not pure P2P vif.
1583  */
1584 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1585 	IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER		= BIT(0),
1586 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI		= BIT(1),
1587 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD		= BIT(2),
1588 	IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE		= BIT(3),
1589 };
1590 
1591 /**
1592  * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1593  *
1594  * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1595  * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1596  *
1597  * @type: type of this virtual interface
1598  * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1599  *	or the BSS we're associated to
1600  * @addr: address of this interface
1601  * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1602  *	interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1603  * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1604  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1605  *	for read access.
1606  * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1607  * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1608  *	these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1609  *	or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1610  *	at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1611  * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1612  * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1613  * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1614  *	when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1615  *	path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1616  *	be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1617  *	processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1618  * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1619  *	interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1620  *	monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1621  * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1622  *	interface.
1623  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1624  *	sizeof(void \*).
1625  * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1626  * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1627  *	protected by fq->lock.
1628  */
1629 struct ieee80211_vif {
1630 	enum nl80211_iftype type;
1631 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1632 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1633 	bool p2p;
1634 	bool csa_active;
1635 	bool mu_mimo_owner;
1636 
1637 	u8 cab_queue;
1638 	u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1639 
1640 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1641 
1642 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1643 
1644 	u32 driver_flags;
1645 
1646 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1647 	struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1648 #endif
1649 
1650 	unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1651 
1652 	bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1653 
1654 	/* must be last */
1655 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1656 };
1657 
1658 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1659 {
1660 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1661 	return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1662 #endif
1663 	return false;
1664 }
1665 
1666 /**
1667  * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1668  * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1669  *
1670  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1671  * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1672  *
1673  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1674  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1675  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1676  */
1677 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1678 
1679 /**
1680  * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1681  * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1682  *
1683  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1684  * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1685  *
1686  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1687  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1688  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1689  */
1690 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1691 
1692 /**
1693  * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1694  *
1695  * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1696  * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1697  *
1698  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1699  *	driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1700  *	particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1701  *	will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1702  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1703  *	the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1704  *	generation in software.
1705  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1706  *	that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1707  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1708  *	CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1709  *	(MFP) to be done in software.
1710  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1711  *	if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1712  *	itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1713  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1714  *	not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1715  *	MIC.
1716  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1717  *	management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1718  *	crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1719  *	properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1720  *	fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1721  *	RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1722  *	%IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1723  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1724  *	driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1725  *	only for management frames (MFP).
1726  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1727  *	driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1728  *	be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1729  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1730  *	a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1731  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1732  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1733  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1734  *	for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1735  *	generation only
1736  */
1737 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1738 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT	= BIT(0),
1739 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV		= BIT(1),
1740 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC	= BIT(2),
1741 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE		= BIT(3),
1742 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX		= BIT(4),
1743 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE		= BIT(5),
1744 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT		= BIT(6),
1745 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM	= BIT(7),
1746 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE	= BIT(8),
1747 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX		= BIT(9),
1748 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE	= BIT(10),
1749 };
1750 
1751 /**
1752  * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1753  *
1754  * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1755  * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1756  *
1757  * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1758  *	wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1759  *	encrypted in hardware.
1760  * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1761  * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1762  *	needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1763  * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1764  * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1765  * @keylen: key material length
1766  * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1767  * 	data block:
1768  * 	- Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1769  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1770  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1771  * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1772  * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1773  */
1774 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1775 	atomic64_t tx_pn;
1776 	u32 cipher;
1777 	u8 icv_len;
1778 	u8 iv_len;
1779 	u8 hw_key_idx;
1780 	s8 keyidx;
1781 	u16 flags;
1782 	u8 keylen;
1783 	u8 key[0];
1784 };
1785 
1786 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN	16
1787 
1788 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1789 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1790 
1791 /**
1792  * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1793  *
1794  * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1795  * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1796  *	reverse order than in packet)
1797  * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1798  *	reverse order than in packet)
1799  * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1800  *	reverse order than in packet)
1801  * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1802  *	reverse order than in packet)
1803  * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1804  */
1805 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1806 	union {
1807 		struct {
1808 			u32 iv32;
1809 			u16 iv16;
1810 		} tkip;
1811 		struct {
1812 			u8 pn[6];
1813 		} ccmp;
1814 		struct {
1815 			u8 pn[6];
1816 		} aes_cmac;
1817 		struct {
1818 			u8 pn[6];
1819 		} aes_gmac;
1820 		struct {
1821 			u8 pn[6];
1822 		} gcmp;
1823 		struct {
1824 			u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1825 			u8 seq_len;
1826 		} hw;
1827 	};
1828 };
1829 
1830 /**
1831  * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1832  *
1833  * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1834  * the secure packet crypto handling.
1835  *
1836  * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1837  * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1838  * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1839  * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1840  * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1841  * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1842  * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1843  * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1844  *     key_idx value calculation:
1845  *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1846  * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1847  */
1848 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1849 	u32 cipher;
1850 	u16 iftype;
1851 	u8 hdr_len;
1852 	u8 pn_len;
1853 	u8 pn_off;
1854 	u8 key_idx_off;
1855 	u8 key_idx_mask;
1856 	u8 key_idx_shift;
1857 	u8 mic_len;
1858 };
1859 
1860 /**
1861  * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1862  *
1863  * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1864  * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1865  *
1866  * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1867  * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1868  */
1869 enum set_key_cmd {
1870 	SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1871 };
1872 
1873 /**
1874  * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1875  *
1876  * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1877  *	this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1878  * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1879  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1880  * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1881  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1882  */
1883 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1884 	/* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1885 	IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1886 	IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1887 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1888 	IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1889 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1890 };
1891 
1892 /**
1893  * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1894  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1895  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1896  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1897  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1898  *	(including 80+80 MHz)
1899  *
1900  * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1901  *	correctly, the values must be sorted.
1902  */
1903 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1904 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1905 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1906 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1907 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1908 };
1909 
1910 /**
1911  * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1912  *
1913  * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1914  * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1915  *	Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1916  */
1917 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1918 	struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1919 	struct {
1920 		s8 idx;
1921 		u8 count;
1922 		u8 count_cts;
1923 		u8 count_rts;
1924 		u16 flags;
1925 	} rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1926 };
1927 
1928 /**
1929  * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
1930  *
1931  * Used to configure txpower for station.
1932  *
1933  * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
1934  *	to the STA.
1935  * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
1936  *	will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
1937  *	%type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
1938  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
1939  *	per peer TPC.
1940  */
1941 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
1942 	s16 power;
1943 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
1944 };
1945 
1946 /**
1947  * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1948  *
1949  * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1950  * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1951  * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1952  * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1953  * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
1954  * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
1955  *
1956  * @addr: MAC address
1957  * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
1958  * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
1959  * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1960  * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1961  * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
1962  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1963  *	that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1964  *	Can be modified by driver.
1965  * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1966  *	otherwise always false)
1967  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1968  *	sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
1969  * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1970  *	if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1971  *	IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
1972  * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
1973  * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
1974  * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1975  *	station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1976  *	notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1977  *	the station moves to associated state.
1978  * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
1979  * @rates: rate control selection table
1980  * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
1981  * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1982  *	valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
1983  * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
1984  * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1985  *	A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1986  *	unlimited.
1987  * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
1988  * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
1989  * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
1990  * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
1991  * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
1992  *	the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
1993  */
1994 struct ieee80211_sta {
1995 	u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1996 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1997 	u16 aid;
1998 	struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
1999 	struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2000 	struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2001 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2002 	bool wme;
2003 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2004 	u8 max_sp;
2005 	u8 rx_nss;
2006 	enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2007 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2008 	struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2009 	bool tdls;
2010 	bool tdls_initiator;
2011 	bool mfp;
2012 	u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2013 
2014 	/**
2015 	 * @max_amsdu_len:
2016 	 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2017 	 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2018 	 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2019 	 *
2020 	 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2021 	 *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2022 	 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2023 	 *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2024 	 *
2025 	 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2026 	 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2027 	 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2028 	 */
2029 	u16 max_amsdu_len;
2030 	bool support_p2p_ps;
2031 	u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2032 	u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2033 	struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2034 
2035 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2036 
2037 	/* must be last */
2038 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2039 };
2040 
2041 /**
2042  * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2043  *
2044  * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2045  * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2046  *
2047  * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2048  * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2049  */
2050 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2051 	STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2052 };
2053 
2054 /**
2055  * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2056  *
2057  * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2058  * 	it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2059  */
2060 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2061 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2062 };
2063 
2064 /**
2065  * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2066  *
2067  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2068  * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2069  * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2070  *	%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2071  * @ac: the AC for this queue
2072  * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2073  *
2074  * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2075  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2076  */
2077 struct ieee80211_txq {
2078 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2079 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2080 	u8 tid;
2081 	u8 ac;
2082 
2083 	/* must be last */
2084 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2085 };
2086 
2087 /**
2088  * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2089  *
2090  * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2091  * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2092  * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2093  * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2094  * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2095  *
2096  * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2097  *	The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2098  *	controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2099  *	should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2100  *	will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2101  *	algorithm.
2102  *	Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2103  *	callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2104  *	the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2105  *	@use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2106  *	timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2107  *	CCK frames.
2108  *
2109  * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2110  *	Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2111  *	the FCS at the end.
2112  *
2113  * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2114  *	Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2115  *	for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2116  *	rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2117  *	to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2118  *	multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2119  *	the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2120  *
2121  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2122  *	Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2123  *	expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2124  *	If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2125  *
2126  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2127  *	Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2128  *	one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2129  *	between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2130  *
2131  * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2132  * 	Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2133  * 	Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2134  *
2135  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2136  *	Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2137  *
2138  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2139  *	Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2140  *
2141  * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2142  *	Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2143  *	stack support for dynamic PS.
2144  *
2145  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2146  *	Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2147  *
2148  * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2149  *	Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2150  *
2151  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2152  *	Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2153  *	the stack.
2154  *
2155  * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2156  *	The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2157  *	periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2158  *
2159  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2160  *	This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2161  *	dtim_period).
2162  *
2163  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2164  *	per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2165  *	the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2166  *	to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2167  *	possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2168  *	only in that case.
2169  *
2170  * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2171  *	autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2172  *	this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2173  *	stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2174  *	Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2175  *	the PS mode of connected stations.
2176  *
2177  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2178  *	setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2179  *	software.
2180  *
2181  * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2182  *	a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2183  *	active interfaces.
2184  *
2185  * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2186  *	be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2187  *	desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2188  *
2189  * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2190  *	crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2191  *	try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2192  *	the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2193  *	supported cipher suites.
2194  *
2195  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2196  *	this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2197  *	for frames.
2198  *
2199  * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2200  *	queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2201  *	for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2202  *	control for more details.
2203  *
2204  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2205  *	selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2206  *
2207  * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2208  *	P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2209  *	is supported.
2210  *
2211  * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2212  *	only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2213  *
2214  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2215  *	and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2216  *	using aggregation for such frames.)
2217  *
2218  * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2219  *	for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2220  *	is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2221  *	CSA frame.
2222  *
2223  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2224  *	or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2225  *
2226  * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2227  *	in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2228  *
2229  * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2230  *	than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2231  *
2232  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2233  *	within A-MPDU.
2234  *
2235  * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2236  *	for sent beacons.
2237  *
2238  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2239  *	station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2240  *	by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2241  *	from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2242  *
2243  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2244  *	reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2245  *	order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2246  *	timeout.
2247  *
2248  * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2249  *	which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2250  *
2251  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2252  *	A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2253  *	When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2254  *	limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2255  *	max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2256  *
2257  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2258  *	skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2259  *
2260  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2261  *	by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2262  *	drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2263  *	is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2264  *
2265  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2266  *	The stack will not do fragmentation.
2267  *	The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2268  *
2269  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2270  *	TDLS links.
2271  *
2272  * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2273  *	mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2274  *	deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2275  *	beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2276  *	virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2277  *	the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2278  *	deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2279  *
2280  * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2281  *	support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2282  *
2283  * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2284  *	course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2285  *
2286  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2287  *	extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2288  *	the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2289  *	but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2290  *	See also the documentation for that flag.
2291  *
2292  * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2293  *	MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2294  *	TXQs to start with.
2295  *
2296  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2297  *	length in tx status information
2298  *
2299  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2300  *
2301  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2302  *	only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2303  *
2304  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2305  *	aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2306  *	A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2307  *
2308  * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2309  */
2310 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2311 	IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2312 	IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2313 	IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2314 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2315 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2316 	IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2317 	IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2318 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2319 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2320 	IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2321 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2322 	IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2323 	IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2324 	IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2325 	IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2326 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2327 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2328 	IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2329 	IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2330 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2331 	IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2332 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2333 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2334 	IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2335 	IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2336 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2337 	IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2338 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2339 	IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2340 	IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2341 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2342 	IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2343 	IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2344 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2345 	IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2346 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2347 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2348 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2349 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2350 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2351 	IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2352 	IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2353 	IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2354 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2355 	IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2356 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2357 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2358 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2359 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2360 
2361 	/* keep last, obviously */
2362 	NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2363 };
2364 
2365 /**
2366  * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2367  *
2368  * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2369  * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2370  *
2371  * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2372  *	802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2373  *	members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2374  *	and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2375  *	bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2376  *
2377  * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2378  *
2379  * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2380  *	along with this structure.
2381  *
2382  * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2383  *
2384  * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2385  *	for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2386  *
2387  * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2388  *	Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2389  *
2390  * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2391  *	only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2392  *
2393  * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2394  *	that HW supports
2395  *
2396  * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2397  *	data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2398  *	queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2399  *
2400  * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2401  *	If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2402  *	set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2403  *
2404  * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2405  *	within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2406  * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2407  *	within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2408  * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2409  *	within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2410  * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2411  *	within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2412  *
2413  * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2414  *	can handle.
2415  * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2416  *	the hw can report back.
2417  * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2418  *
2419  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2420  *	sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2421  *	aggregation.
2422  *	This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2423  *	number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2424  *	it shouldn't be set.
2425  *
2426  * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2427  *	aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2428  *	advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2429  *	the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2430  *	with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2431  *	For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2432  *
2433  * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2434  *	of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2435  *
2436  * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2437  *	(if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2438  *
2439  * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2440  *	reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2441  *	include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2442  *	adding _BW is supported today.
2443  *
2444  * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2445  *	the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2446  *	Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2447  *
2448  * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2449  *
2450  * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2451  *	@units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2452  *	field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2453  *	device_timestamp.
2454  * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2455  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2456  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2457  * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2458  *	radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2459  *
2460  * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2461  *	from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2462  *	other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2463  *
2464  * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2465  *	for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2466  *	enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2467  *	Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2468  *	that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2469  *	neither enabled.
2470  *
2471  * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2472  *	deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2473  *	Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2474  *
2475  * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2476  * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2477  *	supported by HW.
2478  * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2479  *	device.
2480  *
2481  * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2482  *	them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2483  *	unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2484  *
2485  * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2486  *	refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2487  *
2488  * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2489  */
2490 struct ieee80211_hw {
2491 	struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2492 	struct wiphy *wiphy;
2493 	const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2494 	void *priv;
2495 	unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2496 	unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2497 	unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2498 	int vif_data_size;
2499 	int sta_data_size;
2500 	int chanctx_data_size;
2501 	int txq_data_size;
2502 	u16 queues;
2503 	u16 max_listen_interval;
2504 	s8 max_signal;
2505 	u8 max_rates;
2506 	u8 max_report_rates;
2507 	u8 max_rate_tries;
2508 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2509 	u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2510 	u8 max_tx_fragments;
2511 	u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2512 	u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2513 	u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2514 	struct {
2515 		int units_pos;
2516 		s16 accuracy;
2517 	} radiotap_timestamp;
2518 	netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2519 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2520 	u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2521 	u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2522 	const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2523 	u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2524 	u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2525 	u8 weight_multiplier;
2526 	u32 max_mtu;
2527 };
2528 
2529 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2530 				       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2531 {
2532 	return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2533 }
2534 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2535 
2536 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2537 				     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2538 {
2539 	return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2540 }
2541 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2542 
2543 /**
2544  * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2545  *
2546  * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2547  * @req: cfg80211 request.
2548  */
2549 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2550 	struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2551 
2552 	/* Keep last */
2553 	struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2554 };
2555 
2556 /**
2557  * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2558  *
2559  * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2560  * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2561  * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2562  * @status: channel-switch response status
2563  * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2564  * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2565  * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2566  * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2567  * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2568  */
2569 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2570 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2571 	struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2572 	u8 action_code;
2573 	u32 status;
2574 	u32 timestamp;
2575 	u16 switch_time;
2576 	u16 switch_timeout;
2577 	struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2578 	u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2579 };
2580 
2581 /**
2582  * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2583  *
2584  * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2585  *
2586  * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2587  * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2588  * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2589  * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2590  * is already used internally by mac80211.
2591  *
2592  * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2593  */
2594 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2595 
2596 /**
2597  * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2598  *
2599  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2600  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2601  */
2602 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2603 {
2604 	set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2605 }
2606 
2607 /**
2608  * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2609  *
2610  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2611  * @addr: the address to set
2612  */
2613 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2614 {
2615 	memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2616 }
2617 
2618 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2619 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2620 		      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2621 {
2622 	if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2623 		return NULL;
2624 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2625 }
2626 
2627 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2628 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2629 			   const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2630 {
2631 	if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2632 		return NULL;
2633 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2634 }
2635 
2636 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2637 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2638 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2639 {
2640 	if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2641 		return NULL;
2642 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2643 }
2644 
2645 /**
2646  * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2647  * @hw: the hardware
2648  * @skb: the skb
2649  *
2650  * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2651  * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2652  */
2653 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2654 
2655 /**
2656  * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2657  *
2658  * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2659  * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2660  *
2661  * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2662  * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2663  * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2664  * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2665  * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2666  * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2667  * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2668  *
2669  * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2670  * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2671  * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2672  *
2673  * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2674  * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2675  * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2676  * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2677  *
2678  * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2679  * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2680  * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2681  * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2682  *
2683  * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2684  *
2685  * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2686  * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2687  * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2688  * based on the receive flags.
2689  *
2690  * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2691  * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2692  * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2693  * keys.
2694  *
2695  * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2696  * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2697  * handler.
2698  * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2699  * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2700  * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2701  * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2702  * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2703  * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2704  *
2705  * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2706  * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2707  * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2708  *
2709  * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2710  * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to to following
2711  * requirements:
2712  * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2713       mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2714       completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2715    2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2716       at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2717    3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2718       encrypted with the new key and
2719    4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2720    Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2721  */
2722 
2723 /**
2724  * DOC: Powersave support
2725  *
2726  * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2727  *
2728  * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2729  * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2730  * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2731  * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2732  * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2733  * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2734  * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2735  * it finds traffic directed to it.
2736  *
2737  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2738  * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2739  * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2740  * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2741  * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2742  *
2743  * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2744  * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2745  * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2746  *
2747  * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2748  * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2749  * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2750  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2751  * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2752  * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2753  * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2754  *
2755  * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2756  * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2757  * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2758  * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2759  * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2760  * periods.
2761  *
2762  * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2763  * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2764  * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2765  * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2766  * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2767  * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2768  * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2769  * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2770  * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2771  * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2772  *
2773  * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2774  * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2775  * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2776  * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2777  * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2778  * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2779  *
2780  * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2781  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2782  */
2783 
2784 /**
2785  * DOC: Beacon filter support
2786  *
2787  * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2788  * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2789  * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2790  * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2791  * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2792  * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2793  * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2794  *
2795  * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2796  * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2797  * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2798  * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2799  * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2800  *
2801  * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2802  * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2803  * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2804  * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2805  *
2806  * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2807  * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2808  * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2809  * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2810  *
2811  *  - a list of information element IDs
2812  *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2813  *
2814  * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2815  * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2816  * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2817  * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2818  * vendor information elements.
2819  *
2820  * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2821  * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2822  *
2823  * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2824  * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2825  * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2826  * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2827  * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2828  * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2829  *
2830  *
2831  * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2832  * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2833  * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2834  * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2835  * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2836  * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2837  * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2838  * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2839  *
2840  * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2841  * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2842  * signal strength threshold checking.
2843  */
2844 
2845 /**
2846  * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2847  *
2848  * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2849  * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2850  * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2851  * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2852  *
2853  * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2854  * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2855  * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2856  * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2857  * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2858  * hardware flags.
2859  *
2860  * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2861  * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2862  * turned off otherwise.
2863  *
2864  * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2865  * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2866  * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2867  * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2868  */
2869 
2870 /**
2871  * DOC: Frame filtering
2872  *
2873  * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2874  * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2875  * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2876  * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2877  * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2878  *
2879  * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2880  * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2881  * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2882  *
2883  * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2884  * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2885  * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2886  * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2887  * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2888  * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2889  * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2890  *
2891  * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2892  * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2893  * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2894  * or dropped.
2895  *
2896  * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2897  * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2898  * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2899  * the flag, but not clear it.
2900  * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2901  * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2902  * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2903  * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2904  * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2905  * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2906  * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2907  * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2908  */
2909 
2910 /**
2911  * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2912  *
2913  * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2914  * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2915  * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2916  *
2917  * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2918  * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2919  * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2920  * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2921  * the driver code.
2922  *
2923  * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2924  * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2925  * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2926  * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2927  * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2928  * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2929  * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2930  *
2931  * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2932  * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2933  * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2934  * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2935  * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2936  * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2937  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2938  * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2939  * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2940  * @sta_notify callback.
2941  *
2942  * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2943  * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2944  * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2945  * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2946  * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2947  * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2948  * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
2949  * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
2950  * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2951  * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2952  * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2953  * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2954  * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2955  * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2956  *
2957  * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2958  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2959  *
2960  * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2961  * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2962  * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2963  * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2964  * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2965  * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2966  * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2967  * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2968  * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2969  * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2970  * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2971  *
2972  * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2973  * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2974  * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2975  * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2976  * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2977  * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2978  * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2979  * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2980  * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2981  * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
2982  * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
2983  * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2984  * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2985  * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2986  *
2987  * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2988  * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2989  * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2990  * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2991  * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
2992  * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
2993  * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2994  *
2995  * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2996  * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2997  * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2998  * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
2999  * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3000  *
3001  * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3002  * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3003  * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3004  * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3005  */
3006 
3007 /**
3008  * DOC: HW queue control
3009  *
3010  * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3011  * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3012  * was problematic for a few reasons:
3013  * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3014  * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3015  * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3016  *
3017  * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3018  * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3019  * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3020  *
3021  * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3022  * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3023  * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3024  * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3025  * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3026  * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3027  * the hardware queue.
3028  * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3029  * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3030  *
3031  * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3032  * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3033  * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3034  * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3035  * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3036  *
3037  * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3038  * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3039  * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
3040  * off-channel queue:         9
3041  *
3042  * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3043  *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3044  *
3045  * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3046  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3047  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3048  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3049  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3050  *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3051  * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3052  *
3053  * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3054  * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3055  *
3056  * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3057  * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3058  * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3059  * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3060  */
3061 
3062 /**
3063  * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3064  *
3065  * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3066  * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3067  * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3068  * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3069  *
3070  * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3071  *	by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3072  *	multicast address.
3073  *
3074  * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3075  *	%RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3076  *
3077  * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3078  *	the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3079  *
3080  * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3081  *	to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3082  *	by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3083  *	mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3084  *	honour this flag if possible.
3085  *
3086  * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3087  *	station
3088  *
3089  * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3090  *
3091  * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3092  *
3093  * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3094  */
3095 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3096 	FIF_ALLMULTI		= 1<<1,
3097 	FIF_FCSFAIL		= 1<<2,
3098 	FIF_PLCPFAIL		= 1<<3,
3099 	FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC	= 1<<4,
3100 	FIF_CONTROL		= 1<<5,
3101 	FIF_OTHER_BSS		= 1<<6,
3102 	FIF_PSPOLL		= 1<<7,
3103 	FIF_PROBE_REQ		= 1<<8,
3104 };
3105 
3106 /**
3107  * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3108  *
3109  * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3110  * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3111  *
3112  * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3113  * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3114  * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3115  * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3116  *
3117  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3118  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3119  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3120  *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or return the special
3121  *	status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3122  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3123  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3124  *	queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3125  *	driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3126  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3127  *	called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3128  *	ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3129  *	session is gone and removes the station.
3130  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3131  *	but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3132  *	now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3133  *	should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3134  */
3135 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3136 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3137 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3138 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3139 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3140 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3141 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3142 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3143 };
3144 
3145 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3146 
3147 /**
3148  * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3149  *
3150  * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3151  * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3152  * @tid: tid of the BA session
3153  * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3154  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3155  *	actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3156  * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3157  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3158  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3159  * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3160  *	valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3161  * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3162  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3163  */
3164 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3165 	enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3166 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3167 	u16 tid;
3168 	u16 ssn;
3169 	u16 buf_size;
3170 	bool amsdu;
3171 	u16 timeout;
3172 };
3173 
3174 /**
3175  * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3176  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3177  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3178  *	frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3179  */
3180 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3181 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3182 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3183 };
3184 
3185 /**
3186  * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3187  *
3188  * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3189  *	to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3190  *	information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3191  *	flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3192  * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3193  * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3194  *	changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3195  *	the peer.
3196  * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3197  *	by the peer
3198  */
3199 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3200 	IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED		= BIT(0),
3201 	IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED	= BIT(1),
3202 	IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED	= BIT(2),
3203 	IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED	= BIT(3),
3204 };
3205 
3206 /**
3207  * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3208  *
3209  * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3210  * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3211  * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3212  * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3213  * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3214  *
3215  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3216  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3217  *	for sending management frames offchannel.
3218  */
3219 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3220 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3221 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3222 };
3223 
3224 /**
3225  * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
3226  *
3227  * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3228  * reconfiguration type was completed.
3229  *
3230  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3231  *	(also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3232  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3233  *	of wowlan configuration)
3234  */
3235 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3236 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3237 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3238 };
3239 
3240 /**
3241  * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3242  *
3243  * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3244  * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3245  * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3246  *
3247  * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3248  *	skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3249  *	The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3250  *	configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3251  *	preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3252  *	Must be atomic.
3253  *
3254  * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3255  *	is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3256  *	frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3257  *	Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3258  *	or zero.
3259  *	When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3260  *	to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3261  *	is added.
3262  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3263  *
3264  * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3265  *	is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3266  *	it must turn off frame reception.)
3267  *	May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3268  *	an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3269  *	you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3270  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3271  *
3272  * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3273  *	stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3274  *	ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3275  *	configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3276  *	reconfigured at resume time.
3277  *	The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3278  *	wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3279  *	supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3280  *	must return 1 from this function.
3281  *
3282  * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3283  *	now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3284  *	functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3285  *	to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3286  *	will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3287  *
3288  * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3289  *	modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3290  *	supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3291  *	in suspend().
3292  *
3293  * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3294  *	enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3295  *	and @stop must be implemented.
3296  *	The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3297  *	the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3298  *	interface is given in the conf parameter.
3299  *	The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3300  *	negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3301  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3302  *
3303  * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3304  *	is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3305  *	switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3306  *	Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3307  *	found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3308  *
3309  * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3310  *	The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3311  *	and no monitor interfaces are present.
3312  *	When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3313  *	must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3314  *	the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3315  *	MAC address of the device going away.
3316  *	Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3317  *
3318  * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3319  *	function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3320  *	This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3321  *	if it does. The callback can sleep.
3322  *
3323  * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3324  *	parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3325  *	level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3326  *	This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3327  *	for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3328  *	of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3329  *	can sleep.
3330  *
3331  * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3332  *	This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3333  *	to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3334  *
3335  * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3336  *	See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3337  *	This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3338  *
3339  * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3340  *	This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3341  *	should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3342  *	of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3343  *	which flags are changed.
3344  *	This callback can sleep.
3345  *
3346  * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3347  * 	must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3348  *
3349  * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3350  *	This callback is only called between add_interface and
3351  *	remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3352  *	is enabled.
3353  *	Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3354  *	The callback can sleep.
3355  *
3356  * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3357  * 	This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3358  * 	which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3359  *	The callback must be atomic.
3360  *
3361  * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3362  *	host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3363  *	necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3364  *	After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3365  *	userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3366  *
3367  * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3368  *	WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3369  *	offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3370  *
3371  * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3372  *	the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3373  *	configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3374  *	registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3375  *	that power save is disabled.
3376  *	The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3377  *	entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3378  *	at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3379  *	(extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3380  *	When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3381  *	note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3382  *	any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3383  *	This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3384  *	this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3385  *	software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3386  *	capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3387  *	advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3388  *	The callback can sleep.
3389  *
3390  * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3391  *	The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3392  *	but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3393  *	ieee80211_scan_completed().
3394  *	This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3395  *	scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3396  *	The callback can sleep.
3397  *
3398  * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3399  *	specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3400  *	ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3401  *	This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3402  *
3403  * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3404  *	In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3405  *
3406  * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3407  *	is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3408  *	The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3409  *	the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3410  *	can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3411  *
3412  * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3413  *	software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3414  *	this notification.
3415  *	The callback can sleep.
3416  *
3417  * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3418  * 	Returns zero if statistics are available.
3419  *	The callback can sleep.
3420  *
3421  * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3422  *	IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3423  *	IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3424  *	The callback must be atomic.
3425  *
3426  * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3427  *	if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3428  *	stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3429  *	should be set as well.
3430  *	The callback can sleep.
3431  *
3432  * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3433  *	The callback can sleep.
3434  *
3435  * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3436  *	AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3437  *
3438  * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3439  *	station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3440  *	returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3441  *	no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3442  *	the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3443  *	This callback can sleep.
3444  *
3445  * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3446  *	when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3447  *	should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3448  *	callback can sleep.
3449  *
3450  * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3451  *	associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3452  *	in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3453  *	%IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3454  *
3455  * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3456  *	power for the station.
3457  *	This callback can sleep.
3458  *
3459  * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3460  *	station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3461  *	This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3462  *	It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3463  *	up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3464  *	isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3465  *	period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3466  *	See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3467  *	The callback can sleep.
3468  *
3469  * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3470  *	synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3471  *	pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3472  *	the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3473  *	in @sta_state.
3474  *	The callback can sleep.
3475  *
3476  * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3477  *	used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3478  *	from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3479  *	in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3480  *	uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3481  *	otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3482  *	Must be atomic.
3483  * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3484  *	is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3485  *	the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3486  *
3487  * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3488  *	filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3489  *	let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3490  *	the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3491  *	all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3492  *	Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3493  *	The callback can sleep.
3494  *
3495  * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3496  *	bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3497  *	Returns a negative error code on failure.
3498  *	The callback can sleep.
3499  *
3500  * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3501  *	this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3502  *	required function.
3503  *	The callback can sleep.
3504  *
3505  * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3506  *	Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3507  *	required function.
3508  *	The callback can sleep.
3509  *
3510  * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3511  *	firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3512  *	calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3513  *	as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3514  *	The callback can sleep.
3515  *
3516  * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3517  *	with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3518  *	function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3519  *	TSF synchronization.
3520  *	The callback can sleep.
3521  *
3522  * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3523  *	This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3524  *	used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3525  *	Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3526  *	The callback can sleep.
3527  *
3528  * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3529  *
3530  * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3531  *	need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3532  *	and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3533  *	The callback can sleep.
3534  *
3535  * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3536  *	in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3537  *	accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3538  *	estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3539  *	coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3540  *
3541  * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3542  *	be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3543  * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3544  *
3545  * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3546  *	that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3547  *	of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3548  *	use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3549  *	If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3550  *	Note that vif can be NULL.
3551  *	The callback can sleep.
3552  *
3553  * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3554  *	switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3555  *	callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3556  *	completion of the channel switch.
3557  *
3558  * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3559  *	Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3560  *	reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3561  *	(also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3562  *
3563  * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3564  *
3565  * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3566  *	call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3567  *	that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3568  *	offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3569  *	normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3570  *	duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3571  *	ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3572  *	Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3573  *	must be accepted in this case.
3574  *	This callback may sleep.
3575  * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3576  *	aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3577  *
3578  * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3579  *
3580  * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3581  *
3582  * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3583  *	queues before entering power save.
3584  *
3585  * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3586  *	when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3587  *	The callback can sleep.
3588  * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3589  *	&enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3590  *	The callback must be atomic.
3591  *
3592  * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3593  *	parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3594  *	sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3595  *	to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3596  *	Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3597  *	if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3598  *	the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3599  *	the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3600  *	more-data bit must always be set.
3601  *	The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3602  *	from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3603  *	In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3604  *	@num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3605  *	this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3606  *	on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3607  *	period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3608  *	responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3609  *	In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3610  *	bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3611  *	at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3612  *	setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3613  *	service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3614  *	on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3615  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3616  *	This callback must be atomic.
3617  * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3618  *	to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3619  *	via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3620  *	released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3621  *	and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3622  *	frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3623  *	them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3624  *	on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3625  *	bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3626  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3627  *	The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3628  *	frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3629  *	This callback must be atomic.
3630  *
3631  * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3632  *
3633  * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3634  *
3635  * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3636  *	and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3637  *
3638  * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3639  *	before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3640  *	bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3641  *	yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3642  *	transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3643  *	powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3644  *	management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3645  *	driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3646  *	and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3647  *	For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3648  *	would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3649  *	frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3650  *	The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3651  *	mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3652  *      If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3653  *      duration for which the operation is requested.
3654  *	The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3655  *
3656  * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3657  *	a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3658  *	channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3659  *	setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3660  *	mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3661  *	discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3662  *	2 * (DTIM period).
3663  *	The callback is optional and can sleep.
3664  *
3665  * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3666  *	This callback may sleep.
3667  * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3668  *	This callback may sleep.
3669  * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3670  *	may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3671  *	channel context with different settings
3672  *	This callback may sleep.
3673  * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3674  *	to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3675  *	This callback may sleep.
3676  * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3677  *	unbound from vif.
3678  *	This callback may sleep.
3679  * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3680  *	another, as specified in the list of
3681  *	@ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3682  *	to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3683  *	This callback may sleep.
3684  *
3685  * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3686  *	information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3687  *	context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3688  *	software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3689  *	just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3690  *	disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3691  * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3692  *
3693  * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3694  *	during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3695  *	This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3696  *	indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3697  *	This callback may sleep.
3698  *
3699  * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3700  *	Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3701  *	This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3702  *
3703  * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3704  *	Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3705  *	function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3706  *	decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3707  *	ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3708  *	get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3709  *	1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3710  *	transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3711  *	If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3712  *	since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3713  * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3714  *	before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3715  *	gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3716  *	the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3717  * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3718  *	after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3719  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3720  * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3721  *	when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3722  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3723  * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3724  *	when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3725  *	CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3726  * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3727  *	information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3728  *	channel context is bound before this is called.
3729  * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3730  *
3731  * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3732  *	specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3733  *	if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3734  *
3735  * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3736  *	and hardware limits.
3737  *
3738  * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3739  *	is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3740  *	and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3741  *	driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3742  *	the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3743  *	The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3744  *	optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3745  * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3746  *	peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3747  * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3748  *	response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3749  *	parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3750  *	an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3751  *	response template is provided, together with the location of the
3752  *	switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3753  *	the function call.
3754  *
3755  * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3756  * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3757  *	synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3758  *	pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3759  *	currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3760  *
3761  * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3762  * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3763  * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3764  *	contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3765  *	are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3766  *	The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3767  *	some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3768  *	changed parameters.
3769  * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3770  *	cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3771  *	this call.
3772  * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3773  *	ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3774  *	NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3775  * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3776  *	aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3777  *	between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3778  *	skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3779  * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3780  *	Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3781  *
3782  * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3783  * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3784  * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
3785  * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
3786  *	This callback may sleep.
3787  */
3788 struct ieee80211_ops {
3789 	void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3790 		   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3791 		   struct sk_buff *skb);
3792 	int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3793 	void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3794 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
3795 	int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3796 	int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3797 	void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3798 #endif
3799 	int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3800 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3801 	int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3802 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3803 				enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3804 	void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3805 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3806 	int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3807 	void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3808 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3809 				 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3810 				 u32 changed);
3811 
3812 	int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3813 	void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3814 
3815 	u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3816 				 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3817 	void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3818 				 unsigned int changed_flags,
3819 				 unsigned int *total_flags,
3820 				 u64 multicast);
3821 	void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3822 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3823 				    unsigned int filter_flags,
3824 				    unsigned int changed_flags);
3825 	int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3826 		       bool set);
3827 	int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3828 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3829 		       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3830 	void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3831 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3832 				struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3833 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3834 				u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3835 	void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3836 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3837 			       struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3838 	void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3839 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3840 	int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3841 		       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3842 	void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3843 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3844 	int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3845 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3846 				struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3847 				struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3848 	int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3849 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3850 	void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3851 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3852 			      const u8 *mac_addr);
3853 	void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3854 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3855 	int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3856 			 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3857 	void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3858 			    struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3859 			    struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3860 	int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3861 	int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3862 	int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3863 		       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3864 	int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3865 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3866 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3867 	void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3868 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3869 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3870 				struct dentry *dir);
3871 #endif
3872 	void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3873 			enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3874 	int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3875 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3876 			     struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3877 	int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3878 			 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3879 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3880 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3881 	void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3882 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3883 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3884 	void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3885 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3886 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3887 			      u32 changed);
3888 	void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3889 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3890 				    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3891 	void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3892 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3893 			       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3894 			       struct station_info *sinfo);
3895 	int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3896 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3897 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3898 	u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3899 	void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3900 			u64 tsf);
3901 	void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3902 			   s64 offset);
3903 	void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3904 	int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3905 
3906 	/**
3907 	 * @ampdu_action:
3908 	 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3909 	 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3910 	 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3911 	 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3912 	 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3913 	 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3914 	 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3915 	 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3916 	 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3917 	 *
3918 	 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3919 	 * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3920 	 * - ``TX:        8..1...``
3921 	 *
3922 	 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3923 	 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3924 	 *
3925 	 * - ``TX:        1   or``
3926 	 * - ``TX:        18  or``
3927 	 * - ``TX:        81``
3928 	 *
3929 	 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3930 	 *
3931 	 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
3932 	 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
3933 	 * if the session can start immediately.
3934 	 *
3935 	 * The callback can sleep.
3936 	 */
3937 	int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3938 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3939 			    struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
3940 	int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3941 		struct survey_info *survey);
3942 	void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3943 	void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
3944 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
3945 	int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3946 			    void *data, int len);
3947 	int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3948 			     struct netlink_callback *cb,
3949 			     void *data, int len);
3950 #endif
3951 	void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3952 		      u32 queues, bool drop);
3953 	void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3954 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3955 			       struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3956 	int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3957 	int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
3958 
3959 	int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3960 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3961 				 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
3962 				 int duration,
3963 				 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
3964 	int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3965 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3966 	int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3967 	void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3968 			      u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
3969 	bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3970 	int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3971 				const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
3972 	void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3973 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3974 			       const struct ieee80211_event *event);
3975 
3976 	void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3977 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3978 				      u16 tids, int num_frames,
3979 				      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3980 				      bool more_data);
3981 	void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3982 					struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3983 					u16 tids, int num_frames,
3984 					enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3985 					bool more_data);
3986 
3987 	int	(*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3988 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3989 	void	(*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3990 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3991 				struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3992 	void	(*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3993 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3994 				  u32 sset, u8 *data);
3995 
3996 	void	(*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3997 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3998 				  u16 duration);
3999 
4000 	void	(*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4001 					     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4002 
4003 	int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4004 			   struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4005 	void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4006 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4007 	void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4008 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4009 			       u32 changed);
4010 	int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4011 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4012 				  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4013 	void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4014 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4015 				     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4016 	int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4017 				  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4018 				  int n_vifs,
4019 				  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4020 
4021 	void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4022 				  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4023 
4024 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4025 	void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4026 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4027 				 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4028 #endif
4029 	void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4030 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4031 				      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4032 	int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4033 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4034 				  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4035 
4036 	int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4037 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4038 	void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4039 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4040 	void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4041 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4042 					 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4043 
4044 	int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4045 	void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4046 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4047 				       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4048 	int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4049 			   int *dbm);
4050 
4051 	int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4052 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4053 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4054 				   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4055 				   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4056 	void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4057 					   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4058 					   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4059 	void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4060 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4061 					 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4062 
4063 	void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4064 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4065 	void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4066 
4067 	int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4068 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4069 			 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4070 	int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4071 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4072 	int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4073 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4074 			       struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4075 	int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4076 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4077 			    const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4078 	void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4079 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4080 			    u8 instance_id);
4081 	bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4082 				       struct sk_buff *head,
4083 				       struct sk_buff *skb);
4084 	int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4085 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4086 				       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4087 	int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4088 			  struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4089 	void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4090 			   struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4091 	int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4092 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4093 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4094 			      struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4095 	int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4096 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4097 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4098 };
4099 
4100 /**
4101  * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4102  *
4103  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4104  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4105  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4106  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4107  * @priv_data_len.
4108  *
4109  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4110  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4111  * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4112  *	NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4113  *
4114  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4115  */
4116 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4117 					   const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4118 					   const char *requested_name);
4119 
4120 /**
4121  * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4122  *
4123  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4124  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4125  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4126  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4127  * @priv_data_len.
4128  *
4129  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4130  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4131  *
4132  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4133  */
4134 static inline
4135 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4136 					const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4137 {
4138 	return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4139 }
4140 
4141 /**
4142  * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4143  *
4144  * You must call this function before any other functions in
4145  * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4146  * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4147  *
4148  * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4149  *
4150  * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4151  */
4152 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4153 
4154 /**
4155  * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4156  * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4157  * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4158  *	(full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4159  */
4160 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4161 	int throughput;
4162 	int blink_time;
4163 };
4164 
4165 /**
4166  * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4167  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4168  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4169  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4170  *	interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4171  */
4172 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4173 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO		= BIT(0),
4174 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK		= BIT(1),
4175 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED	= BIT(2),
4176 };
4177 
4178 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4179 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4180 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4181 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4182 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4183 const char *
4184 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4185 				   unsigned int flags,
4186 				   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4187 				   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4188 #endif
4189 /**
4190  * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4191  *
4192  * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4193  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4194  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4195  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4196  *
4197  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4198  *
4199  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4200  */
4201 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4202 {
4203 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4204 	return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4205 #else
4206 	return NULL;
4207 #endif
4208 }
4209 
4210 /**
4211  * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4212  *
4213  * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4214  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4215  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4216  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4217  *
4218  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4219  *
4220  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4221  */
4222 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4223 {
4224 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4225 	return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4226 #else
4227 	return NULL;
4228 #endif
4229 }
4230 
4231 /**
4232  * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4233  *
4234  * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4235  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4236  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4237  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4238  *
4239  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4240  *
4241  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4242  */
4243 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4244 {
4245 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4246 	return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4247 #else
4248 	return NULL;
4249 #endif
4250 }
4251 
4252 /**
4253  * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4254  *
4255  * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4256  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4257  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4258  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4259  *
4260  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4261  *
4262  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4263  */
4264 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4265 {
4266 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4267 	return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4268 #else
4269 	return NULL;
4270 #endif
4271 }
4272 
4273 /**
4274  * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4275  * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4276  * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4277  * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4278  * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4279  *
4280  * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4281  * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4282  *
4283  * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4284  */
4285 static inline const char *
4286 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4287 				 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4288 				 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4289 {
4290 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4291 	return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4292 						  blink_table_len);
4293 #else
4294 	return NULL;
4295 #endif
4296 }
4297 
4298 /**
4299  * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4300  *
4301  * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4302  * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4303  *
4304  * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4305  */
4306 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4307 
4308 /**
4309  * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4310  *
4311  * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4312  * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4313  * before calling this function.
4314  *
4315  * @hw: the hardware to free
4316  */
4317 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4318 
4319 /**
4320  * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4321  *
4322  * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4323  * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4324  * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4325  * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4326  * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4327  * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4328  *
4329  * @hw: the hardware to restart
4330  */
4331 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4332 
4333 /**
4334  * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4335  *
4336  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4337  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4338  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4339  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4340  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4341  *
4342  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4343  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4344  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4345  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4346  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4347  *
4348  * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4349  *
4350  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4351  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4352  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4353  * @napi: the NAPI context
4354  */
4355 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4356 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4357 
4358 /**
4359  * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4360  *
4361  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4362  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4363  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4364  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4365  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4366  *
4367  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4368  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4369  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4370  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4371  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4372  *
4373  * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4374  *
4375  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4376  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4377  */
4378 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4379 {
4380 	ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4381 }
4382 
4383 /**
4384  * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4385  *
4386  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4387  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4388  *
4389  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4390  * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4391  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4392  *
4393  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4394  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4395  */
4396 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4397 
4398 /**
4399  * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4400  *
4401  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4402  * (internally disables bottom halves).
4403  *
4404  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4405  * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4406  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4407  *
4408  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4409  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4410  */
4411 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4412 				   struct sk_buff *skb)
4413 {
4414 	local_bh_disable();
4415 	ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4416 	local_bh_enable();
4417 }
4418 
4419 /**
4420  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4421  *
4422  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4423  * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4424  * entering/leaving PS mode.
4425  *
4426  * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4427  *
4428  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4429  * each other.
4430  *
4431  * @sta: currently connected sta
4432  * @start: start or stop PS
4433  *
4434  * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4435  */
4436 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4437 
4438 /**
4439  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4440  *                                  (in process context)
4441  *
4442  * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4443  * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4444  * applies.
4445  *
4446  * @sta: currently connected sta
4447  * @start: start or stop PS
4448  *
4449  * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4450  */
4451 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4452 						  bool start)
4453 {
4454 	int ret;
4455 
4456 	local_bh_disable();
4457 	ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4458 	local_bh_enable();
4459 
4460 	return ret;
4461 }
4462 
4463 /**
4464  * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4465  * @sta: currently connected station
4466  *
4467  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4468  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4469  * connected station was received.
4470  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4471  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4472  * be serialized.
4473  */
4474 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4475 
4476 /**
4477  * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4478  * @sta: currently connected station
4479  * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4480  *
4481  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4482  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4483  * from a connected station was received.
4484  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4485  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4486  * serialized.
4487  * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4488  * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4489  * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4490  * checks.
4491  */
4492 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4493 
4494 /*
4495  * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4496  * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4497  */
4498 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM	ALIGN(14, 4)
4499 
4500 /**
4501  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4502  * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4503  * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4504  * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4505  *
4506  * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4507  * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4508  * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4509  *
4510  * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4511  * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4512  * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4513  * call! Beware of the locking!)
4514  *
4515  * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4516  * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4517  * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4518  * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4519  * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4520  * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4521  *
4522  * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4523  * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4524  * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4525  * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4526  * use this API.
4527  */
4528 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4529 				u8 tid, bool buffered);
4530 
4531 /**
4532  * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4533  *
4534  * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4535  * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4536  * rate selection table for the station entry.
4537  *
4538  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4539  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4540  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4541  * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4542  * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4543  */
4544 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4545 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4546 			    struct sk_buff *skb,
4547 			    struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4548 			    int max_rates);
4549 
4550 /**
4551  * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4552  *
4553  * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4554  * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4555  * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4556  * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4557  * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4558  * slow stations to starve).
4559  *
4560  * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4561  * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4562  */
4563 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4564 					   u32 thr);
4565 
4566 /**
4567  * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4568  *
4569  * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4570  * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4571  * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4572  *
4573  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4574  * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4575  * @info: tx status information
4576  */
4577 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4578 			      struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4579 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4580 
4581 /**
4582  * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4583  *
4584  * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4585  * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4586  * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4587  *
4588  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4589  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4590  * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4591  * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4592  * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4593  *
4594  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4595  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4596  */
4597 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4598 			 struct sk_buff *skb);
4599 
4600 /**
4601  * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4602  *
4603  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4604  * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4605  * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4606  *
4607  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4608  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4609  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4610  *
4611  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4612  * @status: tx status information
4613  */
4614 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4615 			     struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4616 
4617 /**
4618  * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4619  *
4620  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4621  * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4622  * specific skbs.
4623  *
4624  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4625  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4626  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4627  *
4628  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4629  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4630  *	(NULL for multicast packets)
4631  * @info: tx status information
4632  */
4633 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4634 					     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4635 					     struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4636 {
4637 	struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4638 		.sta = sta,
4639 		.info = info,
4640 	};
4641 
4642 	ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4643 }
4644 
4645 /**
4646  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4647  *
4648  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4649  *
4650  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4651  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4652  * for a single hardware.
4653  *
4654  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4655  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4656  */
4657 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4658 					  struct sk_buff *skb)
4659 {
4660 	local_bh_disable();
4661 	ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4662 	local_bh_enable();
4663 }
4664 
4665 /**
4666  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4667  *
4668  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4669  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4670  *
4671  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4672  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4673  *
4674  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4675  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4676  */
4677 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4678 				 struct sk_buff *skb);
4679 
4680 /**
4681  * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
4682  *
4683  * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
4684  * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
4685  * are are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
4686  * 802.11 frames.
4687  *
4688  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4689  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
4690  * calls in the same tx status family.
4691  *
4692  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4693  * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
4694  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4695  */
4696 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4697 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4698 			       struct sk_buff *skb);
4699 
4700 /**
4701  * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4702  *
4703  * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4704  * connected STA.
4705  *
4706  * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4707  * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4708  */
4709 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4710 
4711 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4712 
4713 /**
4714  * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4715  * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4716  * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4717  * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4718  *	to CSA counters.  This array can contain zero values which
4719  *	should be ignored.
4720  */
4721 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4722 	u16 tim_offset;
4723 	u16 tim_length;
4724 
4725 	u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
4726 };
4727 
4728 /**
4729  * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4730  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4731  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4732  * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4733  *	receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4734  *
4735  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4736  * obtain the beacon template.
4737  *
4738  * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4739  * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4740  * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4741  * applicable, the CSA count.
4742  *
4743  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4744  *
4745  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4746  */
4747 struct sk_buff *
4748 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4749 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4750 			      struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4751 
4752 /**
4753  * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4754  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4755  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4756  * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4757  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4758  * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4759  *	(including the ID and length bytes!).
4760  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4761  *
4762  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4763  * obtain the beacon frame.
4764  *
4765  * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4766  * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4767  * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4768  * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4769  *
4770  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4771  *
4772  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4773  */
4774 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4775 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4776 					 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4777 
4778 /**
4779  * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4780  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4781  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4782  *
4783  * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4784  *
4785  * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4786  */
4787 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4788 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4789 {
4790 	return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4791 }
4792 
4793 /**
4794  * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4795  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4796  *
4797  * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4798  * This function is called implicitly when
4799  * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4800  * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4801  * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4802  *
4803  * Return: new csa counter value
4804  */
4805 u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4806 
4807 /**
4808  * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter
4809  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4810  * @counter: the new value for the counter
4811  *
4812  * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be
4813  * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4814  *
4815  * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(),
4816  * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4817  */
4818 void ieee80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4819 
4820 /**
4821  * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4822  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4823  *
4824  * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4825  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4826  * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4827  */
4828 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4829 
4830 /**
4831  * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
4832  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4833  *
4834  * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4835  */
4836 bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4837 
4838 
4839 /**
4840  * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4841  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4842  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4843  *
4844  * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4845  * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4846  *
4847  * Can only be called in AP mode.
4848  *
4849  * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4850  */
4851 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4852 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4853 
4854 /**
4855  * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4856  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4857  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4858  *
4859  * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4860  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4861  * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4862  *
4863  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4864  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4865  *
4866  * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4867  */
4868 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4869 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4870 
4871 /**
4872  * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4873  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4874  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4875  * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4876  *	if at all possible
4877  *
4878  * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4879  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4880  * BSSID and address is used.
4881  *
4882  * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4883  * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4884  *
4885  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4886  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
4887  *
4888  * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
4889  */
4890 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4891 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4892 				       bool qos_ok);
4893 
4894 /**
4895  * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4896  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4897  * @src_addr: source MAC address
4898  * @ssid: SSID buffer
4899  * @ssid_len: length of SSID
4900  * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
4901  *
4902  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4903  * hardware.
4904  *
4905  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
4906  */
4907 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4908 				       const u8 *src_addr,
4909 				       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
4910 				       size_t tailroom);
4911 
4912 /**
4913  * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4914  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4915  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4916  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4917  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4918  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4919  * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4920  *
4921  * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4922  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4923  * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4924  * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4925  */
4926 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4927 		       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4928 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4929 		       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4930 
4931 /**
4932  * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4933  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4934  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4935  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4936  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4937  *
4938  * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4939  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4940  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4941  *
4942  * Return: The duration.
4943  */
4944 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4945 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
4946 			      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4947 
4948 /**
4949  * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4950  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4951  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4952  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4953  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4954  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4955  * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4956  *
4957  * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4958  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4959  * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4960  * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4961  */
4962 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4963 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4964 			     const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4965 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4966 			     struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4967 
4968 /**
4969  * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4970  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4971  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4972  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4973  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4974  *
4975  * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4976  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4977  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4978  *
4979  * Return: The duration.
4980  */
4981 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4982 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4983 				    size_t frame_len,
4984 				    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4985 
4986 /**
4987  * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4988  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4989  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4990  * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
4991  * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
4992  * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
4993  *
4994  * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4995  * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
4996  *
4997  * Return: The duration.
4998  */
4999 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5000 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5001 					enum nl80211_band band,
5002 					size_t frame_len,
5003 					struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5004 
5005 /**
5006  * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5007  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5008  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5009  *
5010  * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5011  * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5012  * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5013  * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5014  * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5015  *
5016  * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5017  * frames are available.
5018  *
5019  * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5020  * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5021  * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5022  * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5023  * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5024  * use common code for all beacons.
5025  */
5026 struct sk_buff *
5027 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5028 
5029 /**
5030  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5031  *
5032  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5033  *
5034  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5035  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5036  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5037  */
5038 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5039 			       u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5040 
5041 /**
5042  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5043  *
5044  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5045  * from the given packet.
5046  *
5047  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5048  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5049  *	with this P1K
5050  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5051  */
5052 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5053 					  struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5054 {
5055 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5056 	const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5057 	u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5058 
5059 	ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5060 }
5061 
5062 /**
5063  * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5064  *
5065  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5066  * and transmitter address.
5067  *
5068  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5069  * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5070  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5071  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5072  */
5073 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5074 			       const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5075 
5076 /**
5077  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5078  *
5079  * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5080  * in the packet.
5081  *
5082  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5083  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5084  *	encrypted with this key
5085  * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5086  */
5087 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5088 			    struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5089 
5090 /**
5091  * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5092  *
5093  * @pos: start of crypto header
5094  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5095  * @pn: PN to add
5096  *
5097  * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5098  * the packet payload)
5099  *
5100  * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5101  * point to the crypto header)
5102  */
5103 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5104 
5105 /**
5106  * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5107  *
5108  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5109  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5110  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5111  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5112  * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5113  *
5114  * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5115  * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5116  * by the device and not by mac80211.
5117  *
5118  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5119  * can be done concurrently.
5120  */
5121 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5122 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5123 
5124 /**
5125  * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5126  *
5127  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5128  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5129  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5130  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5131  * @seq: new sequence data
5132  *
5133  * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5134  * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5135  * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5136  * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5137  *
5138  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5139  * can be done concurrently.
5140  */
5141 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5142 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5143 
5144 /**
5145  * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5146  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5147  *
5148  * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5149  * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5150  * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5151  *
5152  * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5153  * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5154  */
5155 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5156 
5157 /**
5158  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5159  * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5160  * @keyconf: new key data
5161  *
5162  * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5163  * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5164  * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5165  *
5166  * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5167  * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5168  * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5169  * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5170  *
5171  * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5172  * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5173  * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5174  * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5175  * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5176  * of the reconfiguration.
5177  *
5178  * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5179  * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5180  *
5181  * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5182  * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5183  * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5184  * the key that's being replaced.
5185  */
5186 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5187 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5188 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5189 
5190 /**
5191  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5192  * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5193  * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5194  * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5195  * @gfp: allocation flags
5196  */
5197 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5198 				const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5199 
5200 /**
5201  * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5202  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5203  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5204  *
5205  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5206  */
5207 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5208 
5209 /**
5210  * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5211  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5212  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5213  *
5214  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5215  */
5216 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5217 
5218 /**
5219  * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5220  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5221  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5222  *
5223  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5224  *
5225  * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5226  */
5227 
5228 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5229 
5230 /**
5231  * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5232  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5233  *
5234  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5235  */
5236 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5237 
5238 /**
5239  * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5240  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5241  *
5242  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5243  */
5244 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5245 
5246 /**
5247  * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5248  *
5249  * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5250  * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5251  * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5252  * any context, including hardirq context.
5253  *
5254  * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5255  * @info: information about the completed scan
5256  */
5257 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5258 			      struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5259 
5260 /**
5261  * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5262  *
5263  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5264  * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5265  *
5266  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5267  */
5268 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5269 
5270 /**
5271  * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5272  *
5273  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5274  * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5275  * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5276  * while associating, for instance.
5277  *
5278  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5279  */
5280 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5281 
5282 /**
5283  * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5284  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5285  *	been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5286  *	reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5287  *	interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5288  *	haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5289  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5290  *	interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5291  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5292  */
5293 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5294 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL	= 0,
5295 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL	= BIT(0),
5296 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE	= BIT(1),
5297 };
5298 
5299 /**
5300  * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5301  *
5302  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5303  * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5304  * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5305  * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5306  *
5307  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5308  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5309  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5310  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5311  */
5312 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5313 				  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5314 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5315 				  void *data);
5316 
5317 /**
5318  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5319  *
5320  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5321  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5322  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5323  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5324  * be used.
5325  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5326  *
5327  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5328  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5329  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5330  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5331  */
5332 static inline void
5333 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5334 				    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5335 						     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5336 				    void *data)
5337 {
5338 	ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5339 				     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5340 				     iterator, data);
5341 }
5342 
5343 /**
5344  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5345  *
5346  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5347  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5348  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5349  * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5350  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5351  *
5352  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5353  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5354  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5355  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5356  */
5357 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5358 						u32 iter_flags,
5359 						void (*iterator)(void *data,
5360 						    u8 *mac,
5361 						    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5362 						void *data);
5363 
5364 /**
5365  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5366  *
5367  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5368  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5369  * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5370  *
5371  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5372  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5373  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5374  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5375  */
5376 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5377 					      u32 iter_flags,
5378 					      void (*iterator)(void *data,
5379 						u8 *mac,
5380 						struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5381 					      void *data);
5382 
5383 /**
5384  * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5385  *
5386  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5387  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5388  * function for them.
5389  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5390  *
5391  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5392  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5393  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5394  */
5395 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5396 				       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5397 						struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5398 				       void *data);
5399 /**
5400  * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5401  *
5402  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5403  * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5404  *
5405  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5406  * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5407  */
5408 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5409 
5410 /**
5411  * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5412  *
5413  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5414  * workqueue.
5415  *
5416  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5417  * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5418  * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5419  */
5420 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5421 				  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5422 				  unsigned long delay);
5423 
5424 /**
5425  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5426  * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5427  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5428  * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5429  *
5430  * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5431  *
5432  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5433  * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5434  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5435  */
5436 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5437 				  u16 timeout);
5438 
5439 /**
5440  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5441  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5442  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5443  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5444  *
5445  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5446  * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5447  * from any context.
5448  */
5449 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5450 				      u16 tid);
5451 
5452 /**
5453  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5454  * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5455  * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5456  *
5457  * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5458  *
5459  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5460  * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5461  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5462  */
5463 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5464 
5465 /**
5466  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5467  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5468  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5469  * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5470  *
5471  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5472  * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5473  * can be called from any context.
5474  */
5475 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5476 				     u16 tid);
5477 
5478 /**
5479  * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5480  *
5481  * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5482  * @addr: station's address
5483  *
5484  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5485  *
5486  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5487  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5488  */
5489 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5490 					 const u8 *addr);
5491 
5492 /**
5493  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5494  *
5495  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5496  * @addr: remote station's address
5497  * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5498  *
5499  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5500  *
5501  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5502  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5503  *
5504  * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5505  *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5506  *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5507  *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5508  *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5509  *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5510  *      is not reliable.
5511  *
5512  * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5513  */
5514 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5515 					       const u8 *addr,
5516 					       const u8 *localaddr);
5517 
5518 /**
5519  * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5520  * @hw: the hardware
5521  * @pubsta: the station
5522  * @block: whether to block or unblock
5523  *
5524  * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5525  * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5526  * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5527  * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5528  * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5529  *
5530  * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5531  * manner.
5532  *
5533  * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5534  * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5535  * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5536  * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5537  * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5538  * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5539  * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5540  * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5541  * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5542  * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5543  * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5544  * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5545  * woke up while blocked or not.
5546  */
5547 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5548 			       struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5549 
5550 /**
5551  * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5552  * @pubsta: the station
5553  *
5554  * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5555  * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5556  * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5557  * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5558  *
5559  * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5560  * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5561  * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5562  * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5563  *
5564  * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5565  *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5566  *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5567  *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
5568  */
5569 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5570 
5571 /**
5572  * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5573  * @pubsta: the station
5574  * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5575  *
5576  * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5577  * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5578  * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5579  * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5580  * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5581  * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5582  * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5583  * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5584  * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5585  * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5586  * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5587  * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5588  * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5589  * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5590  */
5591 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5592 
5593 /**
5594  * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5595  *
5596  * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver can call
5597  * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5598  * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5599  * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5600  *
5601  * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5602  * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5603  * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5604  * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5605  * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5606  * attempts.
5607  *
5608  * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5609  * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5610  * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5611  * them to 0.
5612  *
5613  * @pubsta: the station
5614  * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5615  * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5616  * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5617  */
5618 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5619 				    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5620 
5621 /**
5622  * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
5623  *
5624  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5625  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5626  *
5627  * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
5628  * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
5629  */
5630 bool
5631 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
5632 
5633 /**
5634  * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5635  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5636  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5637  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5638  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5639  *
5640  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5641  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5642  * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5643  * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5644  * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5645  * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5646  *
5647  * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5648  * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5649  * set_key callback.
5650  */
5651 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5652 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5653 			 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5654 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5655 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5656 				      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5657 				      void *data),
5658 			 void *iter_data);
5659 
5660 /**
5661  * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5662  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5663  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5664  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5665  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5666  *
5667  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5668  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5669  * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5670  * in removal process will be skipped.
5671  *
5672  * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5673  * and thus iter must be atomic.
5674  */
5675 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5676 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5677 			     void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5678 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5679 					  struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5680 					  struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5681 					  void *data),
5682 			     void *iter_data);
5683 
5684 /**
5685  * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5686  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5687  * @iter: iterator function
5688  * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5689  *
5690  * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5691  * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5692  * places while calling into the driver.
5693  *
5694  * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5695  * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5696  * removed.
5697  *
5698  * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5699  * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5700  * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5701  * or not.
5702  */
5703 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5704 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5705 	void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5706 		     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5707 		     void *data),
5708 	void *iter_data);
5709 
5710 /**
5711  * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5712  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5713  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5714  *
5715  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5716  * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5717  * information. This function must only be called from within the
5718  * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5719  * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5720  * %NULL.
5721  *
5722  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5723  */
5724 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5725 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5726 
5727 /**
5728  * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5729  *
5730  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5731  *
5732  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5733  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5734  * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5735  */
5736 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5737 
5738 /**
5739  * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5740  *
5741  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5742  *
5743  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5744  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5745  * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5746  * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5747  * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5748  *
5749  * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5750  * without connection recovery attempts.
5751  */
5752 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5753 
5754 /**
5755  * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5756  *
5757  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5758  *
5759  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5760  * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5761  * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5762  * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5763  * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5764  *
5765  * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5766  * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5767  * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5768  * disconnect normally later.
5769  *
5770  * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5771  * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5772  * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5773  * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5774  */
5775 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5776 
5777 /**
5778  * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5779  *	rssi threshold triggered
5780  *
5781  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5782  * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5783  * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5784  * @gfp: context flags
5785  *
5786  * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5787  * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5788  * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5789  */
5790 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5791 			       enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5792 			       s32 rssi_level,
5793 			       gfp_t gfp);
5794 
5795 /**
5796  * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5797  *
5798  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5799  * @gfp: context flags
5800  */
5801 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5802 
5803 /**
5804  * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5805  *
5806  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5807  */
5808 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5809 
5810 /**
5811  * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5812  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5813  * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5814  *
5815  * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5816  * and wake up the suspended queues.
5817  */
5818 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5819 
5820 /**
5821  * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5822  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5823  * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5824  *
5825  * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5826  * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5827  * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5828  */
5829 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5830 			    enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5831 
5832 /**
5833  * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5834  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5835  */
5836 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5837 
5838 /**
5839  * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5840  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5841  */
5842 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5843 
5844 /**
5845  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5846  *
5847  * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5848  * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5849  * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5850  * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5851  * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5852  * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5853  *
5854  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5855  * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5856  * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5857  */
5858 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5859 				  const u8 *addr);
5860 
5861 /**
5862  * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5863  * @pubsta: station struct
5864  * @tid: the session's TID
5865  * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5866  *	assumed to be out of the window after the call
5867  * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5868  * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5869  *
5870  * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5871  * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5872  * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5873  * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5874  */
5875 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5876 					  u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5877 					  u16 received_mpdus);
5878 
5879 /**
5880  * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5881  *
5882  * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5883  * buffer.
5884  *
5885  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5886  * @ra: the peer's destination address
5887  * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5888  * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5889  */
5890 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5891 
5892 /**
5893  * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5894  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5895  * @addr: station mac address
5896  * @tid: the rx tid
5897  */
5898 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
5899 				 unsigned int tid);
5900 
5901 /**
5902  * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5903  *
5904  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5905  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5906  * reordering.
5907  *
5908  * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5909  * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5910  *
5911  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5912  * @addr: station mac address
5913  * @tid: the rx tid
5914  */
5915 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5916 						      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5917 {
5918 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5919 		return;
5920 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5921 }
5922 
5923 /**
5924  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5925  *
5926  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5927  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5928  * reordering.
5929  *
5930  * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5931  * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5932  *
5933  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5934  * @addr: station mac address
5935  * @tid: the rx tid
5936  */
5937 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5938 						     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5939 {
5940 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5941 		return;
5942 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5943 }
5944 
5945 /**
5946  * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5947  *
5948  * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5949  * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5950  *
5951  * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5952  *
5953  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5954  * @addr: station mac address
5955  * @tid: the rx tid
5956  */
5957 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5958 				   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5959 
5960 /* Rate control API */
5961 
5962 /**
5963  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
5964  *
5965  * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5966  * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5967  * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
5968  * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5969  *	to be filled in
5970  * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5971  *	which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5972  *	used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5973  * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5974  *	RTS threshold
5975  * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5976  *	if the selected rate supports it
5977  * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
5978  * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
5979  * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
5980  */
5981 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5982 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5983 	struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5984 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5985 	struct sk_buff *skb;
5986 	struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5987 	bool rts, short_preamble;
5988 	u32 rate_idx_mask;
5989 	u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
5990 	bool bss;
5991 };
5992 
5993 /**
5994  * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
5995  */
5996 enum rate_control_capabilities {
5997 	/**
5998 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
5999 	 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6000 	 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6001 	 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6002 	 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6003 	 */
6004 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6005 };
6006 
6007 struct rate_control_ops {
6008 	unsigned long capa;
6009 	const char *name;
6010 	void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6011 	void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6012 			    struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6013 	void (*free)(void *priv);
6014 
6015 	void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6016 	void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6017 			  struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6018 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6019 	void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6020 			    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6021 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6022 			    u32 changed);
6023 	void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6024 			 void *priv_sta);
6025 
6026 	void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6027 			      struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6028 			      void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6029 	void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6030 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6031 			  struct sk_buff *skb);
6032 	void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6033 			 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6034 
6035 	void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6036 				struct dentry *dir);
6037 
6038 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6039 };
6040 
6041 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6042 				 enum nl80211_band band,
6043 				 int index)
6044 {
6045 	return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6046 }
6047 
6048 static inline s8
6049 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6050 		  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6051 {
6052 	int i;
6053 
6054 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6055 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6056 			return i;
6057 
6058 	/* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6059 	WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6060 
6061 	/* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6062 	return 0;
6063 }
6064 
6065 static inline
6066 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6067 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6068 {
6069 	unsigned int i;
6070 
6071 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6072 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6073 			return true;
6074 	return false;
6075 }
6076 
6077 /**
6078  * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6079  *
6080  * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6081  * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6082  * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6083  * the most recent rate control module decision.
6084  *
6085  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6086  * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6087  * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6088  */
6089 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6090 			   struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6091 			   struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6092 
6093 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6094 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6095 
6096 static inline bool
6097 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6098 {
6099 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6100 }
6101 
6102 static inline bool
6103 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6104 {
6105 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6106 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6107 }
6108 
6109 static inline bool
6110 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6111 {
6112 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6113 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6114 }
6115 
6116 static inline bool
6117 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6118 {
6119 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6120 }
6121 
6122 static inline bool
6123 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6124 {
6125 	return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6126 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6127 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6128 }
6129 
6130 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6131 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6132 {
6133 	if (p2p) {
6134 		switch (type) {
6135 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6136 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6137 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6138 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6139 		default:
6140 			break;
6141 		}
6142 	}
6143 	return type;
6144 }
6145 
6146 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6147 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6148 {
6149 	return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6150 }
6151 
6152 /**
6153  * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6154  *
6155  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6156  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6157  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6158  *
6159  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6160  * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6161  * matching GroupId management frame.
6162  * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6163  */
6164 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6165 				const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6166 
6167 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6168 				   int rssi_min_thold,
6169 				   int rssi_max_thold);
6170 
6171 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6172 
6173 /**
6174  * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6175  *
6176  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6177  *
6178  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6179  *
6180  * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6181  * applicable.
6182  */
6183 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6184 
6185 /**
6186  * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6187  * @vif: virtual interface
6188  * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6189  * @gfp: allocation flags
6190  *
6191  * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6192  */
6193 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6194 				    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6195 				    gfp_t gfp);
6196 
6197 /**
6198  * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6199  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6200  * @vif: virtual interface
6201  * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6202  * @band: the band to transmit on
6203  * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6204  *
6205  * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6206  */
6207 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6208 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6209 			      int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6210 
6211 /**
6212  * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6213  *
6214  * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6215  * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6216  *
6217  * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6218  *
6219  * private:
6220  *
6221  * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6222  * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6223  */
6224 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6225 	u32 next_tsf;
6226 	bool has_next_tsf;
6227 
6228 	u8 absent;
6229 
6230 	u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6231 	struct {
6232 		u32 start;
6233 		u32 duration;
6234 		u32 interval;
6235 	} desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6236 };
6237 
6238 /**
6239  * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6240  *
6241  * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6242  * @data: NoA tracking data
6243  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6244  *
6245  * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6246  */
6247 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6248 			    struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6249 
6250 /**
6251  * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6252  *
6253  * @data: NoA tracking data
6254  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6255  */
6256 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6257 
6258 /**
6259  * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6260  * @vif: virtual interface
6261  * @peer: the peer's destination address
6262  * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6263  * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6264  * @gfp: allocation flags
6265  *
6266  * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6267  */
6268 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6269 				 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6270 				 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6271 
6272 /**
6273  * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6274  *
6275  * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6276  * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6277  * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6278  * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6279  * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6280  * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6281  *
6282  * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6283  * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6284  * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6285  *
6286  * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6287  * @tid: the TID to reserve
6288  *
6289  * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6290  */
6291 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6292 
6293 /**
6294  * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6295  *
6296  * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6297  * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6298  * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6299  *
6300  * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6301  * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6302  * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6303  *
6304  * @sta: the station
6305  * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6306  */
6307 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6308 
6309 /**
6310  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6311  *
6312  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6313  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6314  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6315  *
6316  * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6317  *
6318  * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6319  * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6320  * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by by RCU and thus the
6321  * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6322  * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6323  * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6324  * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6325  *
6326  * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6327  * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6328  */
6329 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6330 				     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6331 
6332 /**
6333  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6334  * (in process context)
6335  *
6336  * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6337  * (internally disables bottom halves).
6338  *
6339  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6340  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6341  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6342  */
6343 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6344 						      struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6345 {
6346 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6347 
6348 	local_bh_disable();
6349 	skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6350 	local_bh_enable();
6351 
6352 	return skb;
6353 }
6354 
6355 /**
6356  * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6357  *
6358  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6359  * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6360  *
6361  * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6362  * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6363  * driver has finished scheduling it.
6364  */
6365 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6366 
6367 /**
6368  * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6369  *
6370  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6371  * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6372  *
6373  * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6374  * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6375  */
6376 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6377 
6378 /* (deprecated) */
6379 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6380 {
6381 }
6382 
6383 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6384 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6385 
6386 /**
6387  * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6388  *
6389  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6390  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6391  *
6392  * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6393  * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6394  *
6395  * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6396  * this TXQ internally.
6397  */
6398 static inline void
6399 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6400 {
6401 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6402 }
6403 
6404 /**
6405  * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6406  *
6407  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6408  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6409  * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6410  *
6411  * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6412  * internally.
6413  */
6414 static inline void
6415 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6416 		     bool force)
6417 {
6418 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6419 }
6420 
6421 /**
6422  * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6423  *
6424  * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6425  * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6426  * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6427  * next_txq().
6428  *
6429  * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6430  * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6431  * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6432  * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6433  * again.
6434  *
6435  * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6436  * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6437  * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6438  * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6439  * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6440  * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6441  *
6442  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6443  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6444  */
6445 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6446 				struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6447 
6448 /**
6449  * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6450  *
6451  * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6452  * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6453  * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6454  *
6455  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6456  * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6457  * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6458  */
6459 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6460 			     unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6461 			     unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6462 
6463 /**
6464  * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6465  *
6466  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6467  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6468  *
6469  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6470  * @inst_id: the local instance id
6471  * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6472  * @gfp: allocation flags
6473  */
6474 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6475 				   u8 inst_id,
6476 				   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6477 				   gfp_t gfp);
6478 
6479 /**
6480  * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6481  *
6482  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6483  * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6484  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6485  *
6486  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6487  * @match: match event information
6488  * @gfp: allocation flags
6489  */
6490 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6491 			      struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6492 			      gfp_t gfp);
6493 
6494 /**
6495  * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
6496  *
6497  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6498  * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
6499  *
6500  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6501  * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
6502  *          information.
6503  * @len: frame length in bytes
6504  */
6505 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6506 			      struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
6507 			      int len);
6508 
6509 /**
6510  * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
6511  *
6512  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6513  * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
6514  *
6515  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6516  * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
6517  * @len: frame length in bytes
6518  */
6519 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6520 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
6521 			      int len);
6522 /**
6523  * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
6524  *
6525  * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
6526  * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
6527  * hardware or firmware.
6528  *
6529  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6530  * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
6531  */
6532 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
6533 
6534 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
6535